WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that
are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty
Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 or by
contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement
kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..
................................................................................12
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..
.....................................................63
4STARTING AND OPERATING .
.
..............................................................................................80
5MULTIMEDIA ..
.............................................................................................................................120
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................135
7I
N CASE OF EMERGENCY .
.
...................................................................................................177
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ..
.....................................................................................193
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..
..........................................................................................243
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .
.
...................................................................................................250
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................254
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 12
Key Fob .............................................................12
SENTRY KEY .
.
......................................................... 14
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 15
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition......................15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .
.
........................ 16
How To Use Remote Start................................16
To Exit Remote Start Mode .
.
...........................17
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped.
.......................................................17
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped.
.......................................................17
Remote Start Cancel Message..
......................18
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..
... 18
To Arm The System ..........................................18
To Disarm The System ..
...................................19
Rearming Of The System .
.
...............................19
Security System Manual Override..
.................19
Tamper Alert ..
...................................................19
DOORS ....................................................................19
M
anual Door Locks..........................................19
Power Door Locks ..
.........................................20
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry .
.
.........20
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit..
....................22
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped.
.......................................................22
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors.
.......................................................22
STEERING WHEEL ..
................................................23
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped..
......................................................23
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped.
.......................................................24
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped.
.......................................................24
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ..
.25
Introducing Uconnect.......................................25
Basic Voice Commands ..
.................................25
Get Started .
.
.....................................................25
Additional Information ..
...................................25
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED.
.
...26
Programming The Memory Feature ................26
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory .
............................................................27
Memory Position Recall ..
.................................27
SEATS ..................................................................... 27
M
anual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................27
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) ..
..................28
Heated Seats — If Equipped .
.
.........................30
Front Ventilated Seats —
If Equipped .
.....................................................32
Head Restraints ..
............................................32
MIRRORS .
.............................................................. 34
I
nside Rearview Mirror.....................................34
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..
.............................34
Outside Mirrors.................................................3
5
D
river's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.
........................................35
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped .
...................35
Power Mirrors .
.
.................................................35
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped .
......................................................36
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ..
.......................36
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped .
......................................................36
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) ....................................................... 37
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®..
.....................................................37
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ..
..........37
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device.
..................37
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener .
.............................................................38
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device .
.....................................38
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button .
..............................................................39
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ..
.......39
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..
............................................... 40
Headlight Switch...............................................40
Multifunction Lever .
.
........................................40
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs)..
.....................40
High/Low Beam Switch..
..................................41
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped .
.
...........41
Flash-To-Pass..
..................................................41
Automatic Headlights .
.
....................................41
Parking Lights ..
................................................41
Headlights On With Wipers.
.
............................41
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped.
................................42
Headlight Time Delay ..
....................................42
Lights-On Reminder .
.
.......................................42
Fog Lights — If Equipped..
................................42
Turn Signals.
.
....................................................42
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..
................43
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..
................................................43
Interior Courtesy Lights....................................43
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS..
.............45
Windshield Wiper Operation............................45
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ..
.............46
CLIMATE CONTROLS .
.
...........................................46
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................47
A
utomatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..
.........49
Climate Voice Commands..
..............................49
Operating Tips .
.
...............................................50
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ..
.............50
Storage..............................................................50
USB/AUX Control ..
...........................................52
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped ..
................53
Heated And Cooled Cupholders —
If Equipped .
......................................................53
Power Sunshade — If Equipped .
.
....................54
Power Outlets ..
.................................................54
WINDOWS .
.
............................................................56
Power Window Controls ...................................56
Automatic Window Features ..
........................56
Reset Auto-Up .
.
................................................57
Window Lockout Switch..
.................................57
Wind Buffeting .
.
...............................................57
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED..
........... 57
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ..................58
Pinch Protect Feature ..
....................................58
Venting Sunroof.
.
..............................................58
Opening And Closing The Power Shade..
........59
Sunroof Maintenance .
.
....................................59
Ignition Off Operation..
.....................................59
HOOD .
..................................................................... 59
O
pening The Hood ...........................................59
Closing The Hood ..
...........................................60
TRUNK .
................................................................... 60
O
pening The Trunk...........................................60
Closing The Trunk.
.
...........................................60
Trunk Safety ..
...................................................60
Cargo Area Features ..
.....................................61
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .
.
....... 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ........................................ 63
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ....................65
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ..
...................... 65
Location And Controls......................................65
Engine Oil Life Reset ..
.....................................66
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items .
................................................................67
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped .
.
....................................69
Programmable Features..
................................70
4
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 70
Red Warning Lights ..........................................71
Yellow Warning Lights ..
....................................73
Yellow Indicator Lights .
.
...................................76
Green Indicator Lights..
....................................76
White Indicator Lights .
.
....................................77
Blue Indicator Lights ..
......................................77
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .
.
...... 77
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ..
....................................78
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..
.......................................................... 78
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ........................................ 80
Automatic Transmission .................................80
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition.
.
....................80
Normal Starting ..
..............................................80
AutoPark .
..........................................................81
C
old Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .
..............................82
If Engine Fails To Start .
.
...................................82
After Starting..
...................................................83
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED .
.
......... 83
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS........... 83
PARKING BRAKE ................................................... 83
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..
..............................84
Ignition Park Interlock......................................85
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .
.............................................................85
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ..
.................86
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED .
.
............................90
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................91
POWER STEERING .................................................91
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ....91
Cruise Control ..................................................91
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ..
.......................93
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED..
..................................... 102
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 102
ParkSense Display .
.
...................................... 102
ParkSense Warning Display ..
....................... 105
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.
.
............ 105
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System .
.......................................................... 105
Cleaning The ParkSense System ..
............... 106
ParkSense System Usage Precautions..
...... 106
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .
.
........................... 107
LaneSense Operation ................................... 107
Turning LaneSense On Or Off.
.
..................... 107
LaneSense Warning Message..
.................... 107
Changing LaneSense Status ..
...................... 109
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA.
.
............. 109
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................... 110
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release............ 111
VEHICLE LOADING..
.............................................111
Vehicle Certification Label............................ 111
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ..
........ 112
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .
.
............. 112
Overloading ..
................................................. 112
Loading .
......................................................... 112
T
RAILER TOWING ..
..............................................112
Common Towing Definitions......................... 112
Trailer Hitch Classification..
.......................... 114
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .
............................................ 114
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..
........................ 115
Towing Requirements .
.
................................. 115
Towing Tips ..
................................................. 117
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME)..
....................................118
DRIVING TIPS .......................................................118
Driving On Slippery Surfaces........................ 118
Driving Through Water ..
............................... 118
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS..........................................120
CYBERSECURITY .................................................120
UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................121
Customer Programmable
Features — Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings .. 12
1
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES..
....134
Regulatory And Safety Information.............. 134
5
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................135
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 135
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..
..... 136
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .
.
........................140
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped..
................................................... 140
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation —
If Equipped.
.
................................................... 144
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .
.
.. 146
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .
.
..................149
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 149
Important Safety Precautions..
..................... 149
Seat Belt Systems .
.
...................................... 150
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..
.... 156
Child Restraints .
.
........................................... 163
SAFETY TIPS..
.......................................................173
Transporting Passengers.............................. 173
Transporting Pets .
.
........................................ 174
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .
.......................................................... 174
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .
..................................... 175
Exhaust Gas ..
................................................ 176
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..
....................... 176
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................... 177
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..... 177
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING......................... 180
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 180
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ..
............ 181
Jacking And Changing A Tire ..
..................... 182
JUMP STARTING .
.
............................................... 184
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 185
Jump Starting Procedure ..
............................ 185
REFUELING IN AN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED .
.
..................................................... 186
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .......................... 187
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................................. 188
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................. 189
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ......................... 191
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models...................... 192
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models ..
............... 192
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .................................................................. 192
E
VENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........................ 192
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................193
Maintenance Plan......................................... 194
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ..
..................................197
3.6L Engine .................................................. 197
5.7L Engine ..
................................................ 198
Checking Oil Level..
....................................... 199
Adding Washer Fluid.
.
................................... 199
Maintenance-Free Battery ..
......................... 199
Pressure Washing ..
....................................... 200
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .
.
..................................200
Engine Oil ...................................................... 200
Engine Oil Filter ..
........................................... 201
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ..
............................. 201
Air Conditioner Maintenance.
.
...................... 202
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection..
................. 203
Body Lubrication .
.
......................................... 204
Windshield Wiper Blades..
............................ 204
Exhaust System..
........................................... 206
Cooling System .
.
........................................... 207
Brake System ..
............................................. 209
Automatic Transmission .
.
............................ 210
All Wheel Drive (AWD) —
If Equipped .
.................................................. 211
Rear Axle........................................................ 211
F
uses.............................................................. 212
B
ulb Replacement .
.
...................................... 219
6
TIRES .....................................................................223
Tire Safety Information ................................. 223
Tires — General Information ..
...................... 230
Tire Types.
...................................................... 233
S
pare Tires — If Equipped..
........................... 234
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care.
.
....................... 236
Snow Traction Devices..
................................ 237
Tire Rotation Recommendations .
.
.............. 238
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..
..................238
Treadwear...................................................... 239
Traction Grades..
........................................... 239
Temperature Grades.
.
................................... 239
VEHICLE STORAGE ..
............................................239
BODYWORK..........................................................240
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 240
Body And Underbody Maintenance..
............ 240
Preserving The Bodywork .
.
........................... 240
INTERIORS ..
.........................................................241
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 241
Plastic And Coated Parts ..
............................ 241
Leather Surfaces.
.
......................................... 242
Glass Surfaces ..
............................................ 242
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........ 243
BRAKE SYSTEM .................................................. 243
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.. 243
Torque Specifications ................................... 243
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..
...................................... 244
3.6L Engine ................................................... 244
5.7L Engine .
.
................................................. 244
Reformulated Gasoline..
............................... 244
Materials Added To Fuel..
............................. 245
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends.
.
....................... 245
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles... 24
5
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .
.
.... 245
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline.
..................... 246
Fuel System Cautions ..
................................. 246
FLUID CAPACITIES .
.
............................................ 247
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................... 247
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 249
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................250
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 250
Prepare A List .
.
.............................................. 250
Be Reasonable With Requests..
................... 250
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..
..............................250
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 250
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ..
............ 250
Mexico.
........................................................... 250
P
uerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ..
............. 251
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).
........................ 251
Service Contract ..
......................................... 251
WARRANTY INFORMATION.
.
..............................251
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................252
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................252
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C...
......................................... 252
In Canada .
..................................................... 252
P
UBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..
........................252
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................253
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This
Ow
ner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that the authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
1
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol
Ú page 70.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
cu
rrent vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
pr
ocedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
op
e
ration, and reliability. If not followed, may result
in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
AR
ROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pe
rtaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 71
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 71
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 72
9
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 72
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 72
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 72
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 72
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 73
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 73
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 71
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 73
Red Warning Lights
Trunk Open Warning Light
Ú page 72
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 73
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 74
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 74
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 74
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 74
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 75
Red Warning Lights
1
10
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 74
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 73
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 75
Service AWD Warning Light
Ú page 75
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 74
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 74
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light
Ú page 73
Yellow Warning Lights
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Indicator
Li
g
ht
Ú page 76
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Vehicle Indicator
Light
Ú page 76
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 76
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 77
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote
Start (if equipped), and remote trunk release. The
key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
trunk from distances up to approximately 66
ft
(2
0
m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at
t
h
e vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also
contains an emergency key, which is stored in the
rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands
ar
e disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
t
h
e push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
which will display directions to follow
Ú page 253.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds to unlock all the doors and the trunk. To
lock all the doors and the trunk, push the lock
button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
fl
ash and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
1 — Unlock
2 — Trunk Open
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — PANIC Button
6 — Emergency Key
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and the security system will
arm (if equipped).
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
automatically if the key fob is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
will stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
pu
sh of the unlock button through Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 121.
NOTE:
When you use the key fob to open any door, the
cou
rtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach
lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped) will turn
on
Ú page 43.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times
within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the
key fob and pulling the emergency key out
with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
b
lade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace
the battery. When replacing the battery, match
the (+) sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the back
cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your
fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio
-
ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
r
ubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
au
thorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
se
rviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ig
nition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
pos
ition, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
se
ek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
cl
ose securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always remember to place the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition in the OFF position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
ha
ve been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 253.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
ope
rating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF,
ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
fol
lowing modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
power windows).
ON/RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, etc.).
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake
pedal).
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode by
pu
shing the button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
2
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
When opening the driver's door with the ignition
in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the
message will display “Ignition Or Accessory On”
in the cluster.
For more information on proper engine starting
procedures, see Ú page 80.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
v
e
hicle while still maintaining security.
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
re
duce this range Ú page 253.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed through the
Uconnect Settings). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode
for a 15
minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start
button a third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
with a valid Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob in the
vehicle, press the brake pedal and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
Remote Start can only be used twice. The igni-
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position
be
fore the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
th
e engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Trunk closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security Light is flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intru-
sion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle
Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the
end of the 15
minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote Start
button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to
run for the entire 15
minute cycle. Once the
ig
nition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume the previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the
m
e
ssage “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15
minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
am
bient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if selected in the comfort menu
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 121. In
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
tu
rn on when Remote Start is activated, if
programmed in the Comfort menu screen. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted
t
o
the optimal temperature and mode settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position where the climate controls will
resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level Mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
con
trol settings, see Ú page 46.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Re
mote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position. The climate control settings will
change if manually adjusted by the driver while the
vehicle is in Remote Start mode, and exit auto
-
matic override. This includes the OFF button on the
cl
imate controls, which will turn the system off.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The instrument cluster display message stays
ac
tive until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, trunk, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches
for door locks and trunk release are disabled. If
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 20.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 20.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key
cylinder when the system is armed will sound
the alarm when the door is opened.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock
the trunk, the Vehicle Security system is
disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will
remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock
on first press within Uconnect Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
you
r vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm,
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
ba
ttery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security
system in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three times
when you disarm the Vehicle Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To
lock each door, push the door lock knob on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock
knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will
lock. Make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Door Lock Knob
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Ve
hicle Security system.
2
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
key fob is detected inside the vehicle when the
door lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even if
the key fob is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
la
ptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may
not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition
is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open,
the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from
in
side the vehicle without first unlocking the door.
The door may be unlocked manually by raising the
lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™. This feature allows you to lock and
u
nlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push
the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 121.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec
-
tronic device; these devices may block the key
fob
’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive
Entry handle from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp, posi-
tion lamps) for whichever time duration is set
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition is placed
in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
d
angerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm the
Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
th
e door handle, grab the handle to unlock the
vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle will
unlock the driver door automatically. Grabbing the
passenger door handle will unlock both doors
automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(F
OBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition is in the OFF position.
There are three situations that trigger a
FO
BIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert
the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Pa
ssive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
En
try door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Trunk
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
wi
thin 5
ft (1.5 m) of either door handle, pushing
t
h
e Passive Entry lock button will lock both doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
2
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
ha
ndle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle,
without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1
.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right
si
de of the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL), which is located on the deck lid.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE:
If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive
En
try key fob in the trunk and try to close the deck
lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
is outside the vehicle and within 5
ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid Ú page 253.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 121.
The transmission gear selector was not in PARK,
then is placed in PARK.
The driver door is opened.
The doors were not previously unlocked.
NOTE:
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
ac
cordance with local laws.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15
mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can
be
enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per
written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
bl
ade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
the dial to the lock or unlock position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi
-
tion.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the door
w
ith the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
Af
ter engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open a
door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is
impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to
check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping control is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control
To unlock the steering column, push the control
dow
nward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
2
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
telescoping steering column control is located
below the multifunction lever on the steering
column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering
c
ol
umn.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings
Ú page 26, you can use your key fob or the
memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to
r
e
turn the tilt/telescopic steering column to saved
positions.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel has only one temperature
setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been
turned on, it will stay on for an average of
80
minutes before automatically shutting off. This
ti
me will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut
off early or may not turn on when the steering
wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
loc
ated within the Uconnect system. You can gain
access to the control button through the climate or
controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once
to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
st
eering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 17.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in seri
-
ous injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate
-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to
overheat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING UCONNECT
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps
me
nus of your touchscreen means you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4C system.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Voice
Re
cognition
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
re
cognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
VR system.
Helpful hints for using VR:
Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you must
first push the VR button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The VR Button To Begin Radio, Media,
And Climate Functions
2
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
we
ek)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1
-
800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visitwww.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visithttps://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:
1-877-324-9091
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through a
memory switch. Each memory profile saves
desired position settings for the following features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory settings switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
se
lected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, and then push the desired
memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PA
RK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of
two saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select
th
e “Memory Linked To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. P
lace the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
r
elease the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button
(
1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1
or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
f
ob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
se
ttings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PA
RK, a message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
pu
sh the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When
a recall is canceled, the driver seat will stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before
another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
provide an additional storage area. To fold the rear
seatback, pull on the loops located on the upper
seatback.
NOTE:
These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri
-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
2
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Rear Seatback Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded
forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cu
shion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are
left folded for an extended period of time. This is
normal and by simply unfolding the seats to the
open position, over time the seat cushion will
return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright
position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling
on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The power
seat switches are located on the outboard side of
the seat. There are two switches that control the
movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with
the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded
down position) should not be used as a play
area by children when the vehicle is in motion.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the
proper restraint system.
1 — Seatback Control (If Equipped)
2 — Seat Control
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down
by using the power seat switch. The seat will move
in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up
or down using the power seat switch. The front of
the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING!
2
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
wh
ere you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about
2.4
inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(6
7.7
mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
r
e
turn to its previously set position when you
place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or RUN
position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of
an inch (22.7
mm) forward of the rear stop. At
this position, there is no benefit to the driver by
moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
an
d Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
setting profile
Ú page 26.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
th
rough the programmable features in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions
and seatbacks.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are located
within the climate or controls screen of the
touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
Th
e indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
arrows will illuminate for HI, and one for LO.
Turning the heating elements off will return the
user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time
to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to
turn the heating elements off.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over
-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
(Continued)
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60
minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level
setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45
minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see
Ú page 17.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may
be equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to
turn the heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
w
ill provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output
will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level
setting is selected, the system will automatically
switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes
of
continuous operation. At that time, the number
of indicator lights changes from two to one,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
off automatically after approximately 45
minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over
-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over
-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
i
ncreased surface temperature of the seat.
2
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The ventilated seats are equipped with fans that
can be controlled through the climate and control
screen in the Uconnect system. The fans operate
at two speeds, HI and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time
to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
se
ats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see
Ú page 17.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
re
ar of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of
your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped
with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event
of a rear impact, the RHR will automatically extend
forward minimizing the gap between the back of
the occupant’s head and the RHR.
The RHR will automatically return to their normal
pos
ition following a rear impact. If the RHR do not
return to their normal position, see an authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
he
ad restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button located at the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
Front Head Restraint
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart
-
ment.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable
positions: up or down. When the center seat is
being occupied, the head restraint should be in the
raised position. When there are no occupants in
the center seat, the head restraint can be lowered
for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button located at the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraint should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If the center rear head restraint requires
removal, see an authorized dealer.
The outboard head restraints are not adjust-
able.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as
it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
cov
ers or portable DVD players. These items
may interfere with the operation of the Reac
-
tive Head Restraint in the event of a collision
an
d could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart
-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
gl
are from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
wh
en the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
or
off through the Uconnect system Ú page 121.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2
. U
nclip the visor from the corner clip.
3
. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4
. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
b
lockage.
Slide-On-Rod Feature
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun
vi
sor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror
and will automatically adjust for headlight glare
when the inside mirror adjusts.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL
A
ND APPROACH LIGHTING —
I
F EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn
signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs,
which are located in the upper outer corner of each
mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which
flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the
Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these
LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
wh
ich turns on in both mirrors when you use the
key fob or open any door. This LED shines outward
to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
also shines downward to illuminate the area in
front of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after
about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately
once the ignition is placed into the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the
ge
ar selector is moved out of the PARK position.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver's door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To
adjust a mirror, push the mirror select button for
the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror
control switch, push on any of the four arrows for
the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Controls
Power mirror positions can be saved with a Driver
M
e
mory Settings profile Ú page 26.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
2
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the
drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
be
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R
(right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return
the mirrors to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically
cy
cled, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the drive position. If the
mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice or dirt
buildup at the pivot area which can cause
excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Automatic Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Folding Mirrors feature is
en
abled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (with the ignition OFF and all
doors closed and locked).
If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they will
unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON
position.
If the exterior mirrors were manually folded,
they will not automatically unfold.
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be
tu
rned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
t
he following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold
th
em by pushing the button (this may require
multiple button pushes). This resets them to their
normal position.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
wh
enever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 46.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. If the
vehicle is equipped with memory settings, this
feature will be linked to the programmable
settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
tu
rned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre
-
sponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
the center button.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make
sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to
activate the device you are trying to program your
HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
p
osition.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
wh
en programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi
-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
g
ood indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
ha
ve a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow the
steps:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
pr
ocedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
p
osition.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Home
Link® button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
w
ant to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
pl
ugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
cod
e final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
g
arage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
c
onfirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. P
ush and hold the programmed HomeLink®
b
utton and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Follow the procedure on programming HomeLink®
to a garage door opener Ú page 38. Be sure to
determine if the device has a rolling code, or
n
on-rolling code before beginning the
programming process.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people or pets are in the path of the door or
gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
C
arbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
si
gnals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
of transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, follow the procedure. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Ga
rage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
tr
ansmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some US gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cy
cling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2
. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3
inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted
the frequency signal. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
f
lash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
b
utton and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. P
ress and hold the desired HomeLink® button
u
ntil the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. W
ithout releasing the button, proceed with
“
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step
2 and follow all remaining steps
Ú page 253.
2
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, interior lights and fog
lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch without the OFF position. In order to
t
u
rn the exterior lights off, the headlight switch
must be rotated to AUTO position.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
sw
itch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on,
the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (off) position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking lights and
instrument panel lights position to the AUTO
position for automatic headlights. Rotate to the
second detent to turn on headlights, parking lights,
and instrument panel lights operation.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the
engine is started and will remain on unless the
headlights are turned to the on position, the
parking brake is applied, or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate or reduce intensity on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the
low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automating high beam control through the use
of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview
mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting or dese-
lecting “Auto High Beam” within Uconnect
S
ettings
Ú page 121, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc
-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
c
ause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head-
lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
b
e
re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See
a local authorized dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for
up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition in the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be
programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds within
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 121.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
h
e
adlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
wi
ll come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
sw
itch to the AUTO position to turn off the parking
lights.
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on
when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime,
th
e instrument panel lights will automatically dim
to the lower nighttime intensity.
2
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE BI-XENON HIGH INTENSITY
D
ISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
This system automatically swivels the headlight
beam pattern horizontally to provide increased
illumination in the direction the vehicle is being
steered.
NOTE:
Each time the Adaptive Headlight system is
turned on, the headlights will initialize by
performing a brief sequence of rotations.
The Adaptive Headlight system is active only
when the vehicle is moving forward.
The Adaptive Headlight system can be turned on or
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 121.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to
90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off within 45 seconds. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the
headlight switch on then off, or by placing the
ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will
sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is
opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
l
i
ghts or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either push the headlight switch a second time or
turn off the headlight switch.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam head-
lights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
h
i
gh beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec
-
tive outside light bulb.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1
mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically turn
off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
au
tomatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
pl
aced in the OFF position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. The Battery Protection
also includes the glove compartment light and the
trunk light. To restore interior light operation after
automatic battery protection is enabled (lights off),
either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, or
cycle the light switch.
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the
overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on
ei
ther side of the console. These buttons are
backlit for nighttime visibility. To turn the lights off,
push the switch a second time. The lights will also
turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
2
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient
light feature. This light casts illumination for
improved visibility of the floor and center console
area.
Ambient Light
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or
d
ow
nward to increase or decrease the brightness
of the door handle lights, map pocket lights, and
ambient light located in the overhead console.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
(V
ehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Dimmer Controls
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting and
lighted cupholders (if equipped) can be regulated
by rotating the left dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you
can supplement the brightness of the instrument
cluster display, radio and overhead console by
rotating the control to the first detent up until you
hear a click. This feature is useful when headlights
are required during the day. Rotating the dimmer
control up to the second detent, the furthest
position up, turns on the courtesy lights regardless
if the doors are opened or closed.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation, or to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Intermittent Wipers
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
de
tent position, and then turn the end of the lever
to select the desired delay interval. There are four
delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles. The delay intervals will double in
duration when the vehicle speed is 10
mph
(1
6 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever
i
n
ward (toward the steering wheel) and hold. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting,
the wipers will turn on and operate for two cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers
ar
e in the off position, the wipers will operate for
three wipe cycles and then turn off.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST
pos
ition and release for a single wiping cycle. The
wipers will continue to operate until you release
the multifunction lever.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pu
mp; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The washer function must be used
in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 204.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of
four detent positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay detent position
four is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed posi
-
tion.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on
th
e windshield.
Products containing wax or silicone may reduce
Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
f
or
the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3
mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission
is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3
mph
(5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of
th
e NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with a Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in Remote Start mode.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the wiper
control is left in any position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
wiper control is turned off and the blades
cannot return to the off position, damage to
the wiper motor may occur.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Automatic Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
s
e
tting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX
A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to exit. In MAX A/C, the blower
level and mode position can be adjusted to the
desired user settings. Pressing other settings will
cancel MAX A/C.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
fa
ceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is
on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
f
a
ceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator illuminates when
Recirculation is on. Recirculation can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and press
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain
you
r desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed
and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
sw
itch between manual mode and automatic
mode
Ú page 49.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
r
e
lease the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the Climate Control system will return to
the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
r
e
lease the button on the faceplate, to
2
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10
minutes.
NOTE:
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be
peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
te
mperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
te
mperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/
off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
passenger temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
sy
stem. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
c
on
trol knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
se
tting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change
th
e airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
ca
n be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut-off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of
air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
a
n
d warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
de
frost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
se
tting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
th
e faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
press and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver
and passenger temperature control buttons.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to change the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 121.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
A
u
tomatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead.
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the
fol
lowing commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
ad
just the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
2
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
su
ggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
Ú page 239.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
b
l
ower on high. Roll
down the windows for a
minute to flush out the
hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
th
e
(Panel Mode)
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode) position.
Cool & Humid
C
onditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and
turn on (A/C) to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
t
he (Floor Mode)
position. If windshield
f
ogging starts to occur,
move the control to the
(Mix Mode)
position.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Glove Compartment
Cubby Bin
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear
selector. The cubby bin is covered with a
push-push actuated door. Push inward on the door
to open it; push the door a second time to close it.
Cubby Bin
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Console Features
Two separate storage compartments are located
underneath the center console armrest.
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a
r
e
movable upper storage tray that can be slid
forward/rearward on rails for access to the lower
storage area. This tray has an integrated coin
holder, along with additional area for small items
and handheld devices. Below the upper tray, the
lower storage compartment is made for larger
items. In addition, the 12 Volt power outlet, USB,
and AUX jack are located here.
Upper Storage Tray
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in injury
in a collision.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers, there is a storage bin located
in the armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the
storage compartment.
Rear Armrest Storage
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a push-push
design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open.
Push the chrome pad on the door to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
USB/AUX CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
AUX/USB Ports
Located on the rear of the front center console are
dual USB “Charge Only” ports. The USB “Charge
Only” ports will recharge battery operated USB
devices when connected.
1 — USB 1 Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB 2 Port
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Rear USB Charging Ports
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are
equipped with a light ring that illuminates the
cupholders for the front passengers.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
The rear cupholders may also be equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the
rear passengers. The light ring is controlled by the
Dimmer Control
Ú page 44.
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
HEATED AND COOLED CUPHOLDERS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and
cooled cupholders. The cupholders are designed
to help keep warm beverages warm and cool
beverages cool.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
Push the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the
cu
pholder. Push the symbol a second time to turn
the cupholder off. Push the “Hot” symbol once to
activate the cupholder. Push the symbol a second
time to turn off the cupholder.
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup-
holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe
-
tes, spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use,
ex
haustion or other physical condition must
exercise particular care in order to prevent seri
-
ous burn injury. Keep the cupholder free of
de
bris or stray objects when operated in the
“Hot” position.
2
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNSHADE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power
sunshade that will reduce the amount of sunlight
that will shine through the rear windshield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the
Uc
onnect system
Ú page 121.
Press the “Controls” button and then press the
“Rear Sunshade” button to raise the power
sunscreen. Press the “Rear Sunshade” button a
second time to lower the sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the
vehicle is placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will
automatically fully lower. When the transmission is
shifted out of REVERSE the sunshade will
automatically return to the fully raised position
after a brief delay.
The power sunshade can also be operated by
passengers in the rear seats. The power sunshade
switch is located on the back of the center console
between the heated seat switches. Push the
switch once to raise the sunshade. Push the switch
a second time to lower the sunshade.
Power Sunshade Switch Behind Center Console
NOTE:
The rear sunshade control switch can be locked
out
along with the rear passenger window controls
from the driver switch window lockout switch.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet on the instrument panel and one
12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet in the center
c
onsole that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets are labeled with
either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how
the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a
“key” are powered when the ignition switch is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
out
lets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage
area on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a
power outlet located in the storage area of the
center console.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located
on the center console on vehicles not equipped
with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily
injury could result.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Center Console Power Outlet
NOTE:
If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
ma
ximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the
center console power outlet. When the Media Hub
is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts
(10 Amps). If the power rating is exceeded, the
fuse protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
con
sole USB ports can be changed to “battery”
powered at all times by moving the #12 20 Amp
fuse from “IGN” to “B+”. These fuses are located in
the fuse box in the trunk, below the load floor.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel
Power Outlet/Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console
Power Outlet/Media Hub
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu
-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
ba
ttery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause damage.
2
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated
by
using the single window controls on the
passenger door trim panel. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up
to 10
minutes after the ignition is placed in the
O
F
F position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The timing is programmable within
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 121.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
s
w
itches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down to the second detent, release,
and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Pull the window switch up to the second detent and
t
he window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
du
ring the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
sw
itch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
au
to-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
tr
igger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
c
ompletely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the window
is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window completely
and continue to hold the switch down for an
additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the button will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
2
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one
-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
r
earward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened position until the switch is operated and
held again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the "Vent" button within one-half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
ve
nt switch is pushed, the sunshade will automati-
cally cycle to the halfway open position prior to the
s
unroof opening to the Vent position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
HADE
Express Open/Close
Push the shade switch rearward and release it
w
i
thin one-half second and the shade will
automatically open to the halfway position and
stop automatically. Push the switch again to fully
open the shade.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one
-half second and the shade will close
automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
an
y other movement of the shade switch will stop
the shade.
Manual Open/Close
To open the shade, push and hold the switch
r
earward. The shade will open and stop
automatically at the half-open position. Push and
hold the switch again and the shade will fully open.
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed again.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10
minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to
the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
This feature is programmable using the Uconnect
sy
stem Ú page 121.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
d
river’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Reach under the hood, move the safety latch
t
o the left, and lift the hood.
Hood Safety Latch
2
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLOSING THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the hood
open.
TRUNK
OPENING THE TRUNK
The trunk may be opened in several ways:
Power trunk release button on the instrument
panel
Trunk button on the key fob
Trunk Passive Entry button Ú page 20
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the trunk
ope
n symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer
display will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk
open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Power Trunk Release Button
The trunk can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power trunk release
b
utton located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The transmission must be in PARK before the
bu
tton will operate.
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Push the power trunk button on the key
fob twice within five seconds to release
t
he trunk.
Passive Entry Button
Push the trunk Passive Entry button which is
loc
ated on the right side of the trunk lid. With a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5
ft (1.5 m) of the
trunk, push the Passive Entry button to open the
trunk.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
CLOSING THE TRUNK
With one or more hands placed on the outside
trunk surface push the trunk lid down until you
hear the trunk lock latch into place.
NOTE:
Before closing the trunk lid make sure your key fob
is
n’t inside the trunk area. The trunk will latch then
automatically unlock if the key fob is detected, not
allowing the key fob to be locked in the trunk area.
TRUNK SAFETY
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency
r
e
lease lever is built into the trunk latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being
locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened
by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle attached
to the trunk latching mechanism.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12
inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
(Continued)
Trunk Emergency Release
CARGO AREA FEATURES
60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat —
If Equipped
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides
cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down
easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks
and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down,
they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of
the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright
position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling
on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area.
The trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the
trunk from mud, snow, and debris.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the
trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from
outside, or through the inside of the vehicle.
Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is
unattended. Once in the trunk, young children
may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with
the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded
down position) should not be used as a play
area by children at any time. They could be
seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the rear
cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended
for load carrying purposes only, not for
passengers, who should sit in seats and use
seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow these
guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor.
Put heavier objects as low and as far forward
as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
stop or collision.
WARNING!
2
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag
hooks, located on either side of the rear cargo
area.
Grocery Bag Hooks
Cargo Net — If Equipped
The rear cargo area may be equipped with a cargo
net to keep items secure while driving.
Rear Cargo Net
Attachment
To attach the cargo net, the clips must be hooked
t
h
rough the loops on both sides of the cargo area.
Cargo Net Attachments
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a
level-riding vehicle under most passenger and
cargo loading conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock
ab
sorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the
correct height. It takes approximately 1
mile
(1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete
de
pending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for
approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will
bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to
reset the system.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lb
(22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may
occur to hook and mounting surface.
1 — Top Attachment
2 — Bottom Attachment
63
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L Engine
3
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster for 5.7L Engine
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages
Ú page 65.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal oper
-
ating range.
5. F
uel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the fuel
d
oor
is located.
NOTE:
The warning / indicator Lights will briefly illuminate
for
a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing,
and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings when
they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information
you want and make selections and adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features an
interactive display which is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select
a
variety of useful information by pushing the
arrow buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel. The instrument cluster display
menu items consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up
or
down arrow buttons allows
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
a
rea.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left
or
right arrow button allows
you to cycle through the submenu items of the
Ma
in menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the
up / down or left / right
arrow button will loop the user through the
c
u
rrently selected menu or options presented
on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main menu
will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the
OK button changes units (mph or
km/h).
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and
submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the
up and
down arrow buttons will allow the user to
select the item of interest.
Pushing the
OK button makes the selection. A
confirmation screen will appear, returning the
user to the first page of the submenu.
Pushing the
left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus:
Information is reset by pushing and holding the
OK button.
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
in
dicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
ea
ch time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
and release the
OK or arrow buttons. To reset the
oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Ig
nition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“V
ehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the
O
K button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric
display will update to show 100%. If conditions
are not met a pop-up message of "To reset oil
life engine must be off with ignition in run" will
be displayed (for five seconds), and the user
will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the
u
p or down arrow
button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
th
e vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. W
ithout pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
th
e vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired Selectable Menu item is
di
splayed in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the OK button to toggle between
mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
The Vehicle Info consists of the following submenu
(pushing the
left or right
arrow button will
allow you to scroll through the submenu):
Tire Pressure Monitor
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
AWD Status — If Equipped
Battery Voltage
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu provides the status and a
visual about the Adaptive Cruise Control and
LaneSense features. When they are both off the
screen, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) and LaneSense Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature —
If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
A
C
C system settings Ú page 93. The information
displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the
s
t
eering wheel) until one of the following displays
in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“
Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
se
tting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
st
eering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC Set
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
i
nstrument cluster.
3
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
La
neSense system settings
Ú page 107. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status. Push the LaneSense button
(located on the center stack below the Uconnect
display) until one of the following displays in the
instrument cluster display:
LaneSense Off
When LaneSense is deactivated, the display will
re
ad “LaneSense Off.”
LaneSense On
When LaneSense is activated, the display will
r
e
ad “LaneSense On.”
Fuel Economy
The Fuel Economy Menu has two submenu pages;
one with Current Value (instantaneous calculation
of the fuel economy) displayed and one without the
Current Value displayed (toggle the
left
or
right arrow button to select one):
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or
km/L).
Range To Empty (miles or km).
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or
km/L).
Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an
amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy
improves.
Hold the
OK button to reset average fuel
economy information.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip Menu item is displayed in the
i
n
strument cluster display. Toggle the
left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of Trip A
or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since the last reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This menu displays the Audio information of the
currently playing audio source (e.g. FM radio).
Messages
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages, if any. Pushing the
left
or
r
ight
a
rrow button will allow you to scroll through the
st
ored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the
in
strument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster
as well as the location that information is
displayed.
NOTE:
Screen Setup is available only when the vehicle is
not
in motion.
1. Upper Left
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
2. U
pper Right
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
3. Restore Default
OK
Cancel
4. Current Gear
On
Off
5. O
dometer
Show
Hide
6. Fuel Gauge
Standard
Detailed
7. C
enter
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Information
Menu Title
Digital Speed
None
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
fa
ilure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“B
attery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag
-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
Ú page 72.
3
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel — If
Equipped
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
mor
e of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of the charging system. The charging system is
still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
115 Volts AC, USB ports) during certain driving
con
ditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop
-
ping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
ac
tion message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
The instrument cluster display can be used to view
or change the following settings. Push the
up or
down arrow button to scroll through the main
menus, then push the
r
i
ght arrow button to
scroll through the submenus of each menu item.
Pu
sh the
left arrow button to scroll back to a
previous menu or submenu.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active warning lights will display first
if applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some warning lights are
optional and may not appear.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
t
u
rn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
p
a
rking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
ca
pacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cor
nering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(A
BS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
ch
ecked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
ap
plied. It does not show the degree of brake appli
-
cation.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
un
buckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound
Ú page 149.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
3
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on
while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
el
ectrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
ch
ime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
St
eering (EPS) system
Ú page 91.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
I
f
a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pe
dals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
e
n
gine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool,
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
an
d stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 187.
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
ch
ime.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
li
ght turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
cor
rected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
h
i
gh. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
T
h
is may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or
NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
Ve
hicle Security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service Ú page 93.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
p
l
aced in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
3
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is
A
c
tive. The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30
mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as
soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ig
nition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
R
U
N or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system
will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
r
e
quires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
w
a
rnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the
use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid white/green to flashing yellow
Ú page 107.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.9 gal (7.13 L), this light
wi
ll turn on and a single chime will sound.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 199.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Di
agnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will turn on to indicate
the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not
fu
nctioning properly and that service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
W
a
rning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service
Ú page 144.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
t
i
re pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned previously, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
eq
uipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure warning light when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach
higher temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
3
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
pr
oper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
warning light.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
warning light. When the system detects a
malfunction, the warning light will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction warning light after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off
Ú page 144.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for
the ACC system when the system is
en
gaged
Ú page 93.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
a vehicle in front is detected Ú page 93.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
s
p
eed Ú page 91.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 40.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings
ha
ve been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs
Ú page 107.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
tu
rned on
Ú page 40.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
fl
ash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1
mile (1.6 km) with either
t
u
rn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO mode is
active.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set Ú page 93.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 91.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
il
luminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has
been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line
Ú page 107.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
ar
e on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
3
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 120.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
th
e Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may
n
ot be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a
battery replacement. If the OBD II system should
be determined not ready for the I/M test, your
vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
wh
ich you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
st
art this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
in
cluding personal information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is
not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is
not
ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the previously mentioned test routine
may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
80
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your
seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the PARK position
before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
in the passenger compartment.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
t
he ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obt
ained without pumping or pressing the accel
-
erator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Bu
tton
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
S
TART/STOP button must be held for two
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in OFF mode, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a
number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
(Continued)
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
be
fore the engine will shut off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to
the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
E
NGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5
mph (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “
Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
ST
ART/STOP button is pushed once with the
vehicle speed below 5
mph (8 km/h), the engine
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2
mph
(1.9
km/h), the vehicle will AutoPark Ú page 81.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to
an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC,
and RUN. To change the ignition modes without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow
these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2
. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
p
lace the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
t
ime to return the ignition to the OFF mode.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations
on the following pages occur. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into
PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
th
e engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and an
eight speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
en
gine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC Mode.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
ve
hicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and near the
gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking,
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
WARNING!
4
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and an
eight speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
A
u
toPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
di
splayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases,
the gear selector must be returned to “P” to select
desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
V
ehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
vehicle speed is above 1.2
mph (1.9 km/h).
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
cluster display and near the gear selector. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” or “Cold Weather Operation”
procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there.
Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds.
This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2
mph (1.9 km/h). A
vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto
-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 184.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before
t
rying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the
hood
on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a
removable cap that is located near the air box.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, and rear axle) in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(5
00 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
sp
eeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
d
e
sirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration
in low gear can be detrimental and should be
avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lu
bricant installed at the factory are high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle
operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 247.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
fe
w thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil indi
-
cator often during the break in period. Add oil as
re
quired.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below
th
e lower left corner of the instrument panel. To
apply the parking brake, firmly push the parking
brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake,
press the parking brake pedal a second time and
let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
s
w
itch in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
fr
ont wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
sh
ifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
d
angerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil
-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
br
ake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ig
nition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is
OFF (not in ACC mode)
before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also
be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi
-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil
-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis
-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
4
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S)
is displayed both above the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
simply rotate the gear selector. To access the L or
S position, push down on the gear selector and
then rotate it. You must also press the brake pedal
to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL,
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once
(such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
se
lector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
th
e accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
Standard Gear Selector
The standard transmission gear selector has
PA
RK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift
positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based
on vehicle speed.
Premium Gear Selector
Premium Gear Selector With AutoStick
The premium transmission gear selector provides
PA
RK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using
the AutoStick shift control (shift paddles mounted
on the steering wheel). Pressing the shift paddles
(-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will
manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc
Ú page 89.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
al
low the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
i
s cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
tr
ansmission into PARK first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
be
fore shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
(Continued)
(Continued)
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi
-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
b
linking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
d
angerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis
-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
4
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position,
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears. The DRIVE position provides
optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the AutoStick shift control (if equipped) to select a
lower gear
Ú page 89. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear will improve performance and
e
xtend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-
30°C] or below), transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED
This mode alters the transmission's automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds
are increased to make full use of available engine
power.
To access SPORT mode, push down on the gear
selector and rotate it fully clockwise, or push the
SPORT button in the center stack.
LOW (L) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this range for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the
transmission will downshift for increased engine
braking. To access the LOW position, push down
on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For “Recreational Towing” Ú page 118
For “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” Ú page 191
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
tr
ansmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
in
dicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2
. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If
n
ot, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6
. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
p
roblem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
re
commend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
de
aler service is required.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT
mod
e, it will operate automatically, shifting
between the eight available gears. To engage
AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering
wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in DRIVE
or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will activate a
temporary AutoStick mode. The transmission will
revert back to normal operation after a period of
time, depending on accelerator pedal activity.
When the transmission gear selector is in the
SPORT position, tapping either shift paddle will
activate "permanent" AutoStick mode. The
transmission will remain in AutoStick mode until
the driver deliberately disables AutoStick. Tapping
(-) to enter AutoStick will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+)
to enter AutoStick will retain the current gear.
When AutoStick is active, the current transmission
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Paddle Shifters
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
dow
n when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except
as follows:
If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached. If the accel
-
erator is fully pressed, the transmission will
1 — Shift Paddle Downshift
2 — Shift Paddle Upshift
4
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
downshift when possible (based on current
vehicle speed and gear). Lack of accelerator
pedal activity will cause the transmission to
revert to automatic operation.
If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission
gear selector is in the SPORT position, manual
gear selection will be maintained until the gear
selector is returned to DRIVE, or as described
below. The transmission will not upshift auto
-
matically at redline in this mode, nor will down-
shifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
p
ressed to the floor.
In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmis-
sion will automatically downshift as the vehicle
s
l
ows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the trans
-
mission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle pressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the
(+) shift paddle until "D" or "S" is once again
indicated in the instrument cluster. Shifting out of
SPORT mode will also disable AutoStick. You can
shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode Button
If your vehicle is equipped with SPORT mode, this
mode is a configuration set up for typical
enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission and
steering systems are all set to their SPORT
settings. SPORT mode will provide improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest
amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pushing the SPORT
button on the instrument panel switch bank.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The system
is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
fu
nctionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The Electric Power Steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking
and good feel while driving. If the electric steering
system experiences a fault that prevents it from
providing assist, you will still have the ability to
steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
se
lected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light is displayed and the
“
SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the
“POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within the
instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service
Ú page 70.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe
-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light is
displayed and the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM
OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred
which caused an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light and message turn off.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control system takes
over accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25
mph (40 km/h), or 20 mph (32 km/h)
depending on engine size and axle ratio.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
4
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in
the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Cruise Control is on. To turn the system off, push
the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE
CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push and release the
SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set, a message “CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating the set speed. A cruise indicator lamp,
along with set speed will also appear and stay on
in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
s
p
eed by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1
mph speed adjustment. Each
s
u
bsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1
mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab
-
lished.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
su
bsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1
km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab
-
lished.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accelerate
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decelerate
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an acci-
dent. Always leave the system OFF when you are
n
ot using it.
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
(Continued)
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20
mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from
memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
th
e OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function
performs differently
Ú page 91.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
i
n light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC
utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead
of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of
the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli
-
sion Warning systems.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the feature selected
Ú page 253.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
dr
iver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi
-
tions. Your complete attention is always
re
quired while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn
-
ings can result in a collision and death or
se
rious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance condi
-
tions.
4
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button until one of the
fol
lowing appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“A
daptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
se
tting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
t
he display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
di
splay selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following the vehicle in front and
hold the vehicle for two seconds in the
stop position. If the vehicle in front does
not start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manually.
An audible chime will sound when the
brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Setting Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Setting Increase
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
s
tate, the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
tions:
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the gear selector is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Ad
aptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
AC
C enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed
Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
be
low
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20
mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20
mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
a
bove 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
th
e current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system
will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no
alarm will sound even if you are too close to the
vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
4
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
be controlling the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accel
-
erator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
sy
stem:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32
km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
b
e
ing used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
sp
eed by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
su
bsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1
mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5
mph increments until
t
h
e button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1
km/h speed adjustment. Each
s
u
bsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1
km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments
un
til the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+
) button or
SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traf-
fic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set
sp
eed that is too high or too low for prevailing
traffic and road conditions could cause the vehi
-
cle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for
sa
fe operation. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in a collision and death or serious per
-
sonal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
When ACC Is Active:
NOTE:
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the
vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a vehicle in front and hold the
vehicle for two seconds in the stop position. If
the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds, the ACC system will display a
message that the system will release the brakes
and that the brakes must be applied manually.
An audible chime will sound when the brakes
are released.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Di
stance Setting Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster display will show the ACC Set With Target
Detected Indicator Light, and the system will adjust
the vehicle speed automatically to maintain the
distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
un
til:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 95.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
how
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
sy
stem applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
di
splay is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal (Lane Change Assist feature included) and
will only be active when passing on the left hand
side. Switching lanes will not impact the ACC
system if the driver is already traveling at the set
speed.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle in
front, your vehicle will resume motion without any
driver interaction if the vehicle in front starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming
to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
tw
o seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required
at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
st
andstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver
intervention will be required at this moment.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
su
ch as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster will display the above
message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow,
or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Se
nsor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
sh
ould examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be careful not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc
-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an authorized
dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or after-
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
s
ystem failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance. This most often occurs at
times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy
rain and fog. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will display “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the
system will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
dr
iving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/
FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
fu
nctionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Wi
ndshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and
forward facing camera inspected at an authorized
dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using
ACC.
4
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Th
e driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
Turn Or Bend Example
USING ACC ON HILLS
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
ACC performance may be limited.
NOTE:
The driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
re
main alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
ACC Hill Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the
vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take
action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react
in situations where the vehicle you are following
exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in
your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply
the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
4
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear and/or front fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
For limitations of this system and
re
commendations, see Ú page 106.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or
d
isabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
se
lector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7
mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active
ag
ain if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6
mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12
inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. These distances depend
on the location, type, and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12
inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from
the front fascia/bumper. These distances depend
on the location, type, and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE, or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions based
on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region,
th
e display will show a single solid arc in the center
rear region and will produce a one-half second
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from slow, to
fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
re
ar region, the display will show a single flashing
arc in the left and/or right rear region and will
produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from fast to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region,
th
e display will show a single arc in the center front
region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle. A fast sound tone will be produced
when reaching the second flashing arc and will
change to a continuous tone when the first flashing
arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
front region, the display will show a single flashing
arc in the left and/or right front region and will
produce a fast tone. As the vehicle moves closer to
the obstacle, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from fast to continuous.
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79
inches
(2
00 cm)
79-59 inches
(2
00-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12
inches
(3
0 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert C
hime None
Single 1/2-
Se
cond Tone (for
rear center only)
Slow (for rear
ce
nter only)
Slow (for rear
center only)
Fast (for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Ch
ime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
au
dible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
se
lected in the Uconnect system Ú page 121.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
a
nd high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
within the Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
th
e instrument cluster display Ú page 65. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
b
etween the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
th
e system, the instrument cluster will display the
“ParkSense Off” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster will display the “ParkSense Off”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
Pa
rkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed and
the system requires service, the ParkSense switch
LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will
be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the
front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning
properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SE
NSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
RE
QUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
4
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE
OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12
inches
(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
as
sembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds
the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom
-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
sh
oulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(1
80
km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
f
or
ward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the
steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries. If the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane, the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
wa
rning by applying torque to the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
th
e driver unintentionally drifts across the lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides visual warnings through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will
not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
Lan
eSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
center stack below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on). A
“LaneSense Off” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
st
ate, on or off, from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
a
re gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is
solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the left
l
a
ne marking has been detected and the system
is ready to provide visual warnings in the instru
-
ment cluster display if an unintentional lane
de
parture occurs.
4
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow
(on/off), the left thin line remains solid yellow
and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid
white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Ye
llow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
be
havior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected.
The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both
lane markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line
turn solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift With Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow
(on/off) and the left thin line remains solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from
solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Ye
llow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
be
havior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
zone sensitivity (early/med/late) that you can
configure through the Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
NOTE:
When enabled, the system operates above
37
mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(
1
80 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with the use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
display screen along with a caution note to “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
b
ottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
t
h
rough the Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned on, the rear camera image
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. However, this
feature is canceled if the forward vehicle speed
exceeds 8
mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
sh
ifted into PARK, the vehicle's ignition is placed in
the OFF position, or the user presses the image
defeat X button.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Camera Delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
exited and the last touchscreen appears again.
When manually activated, a counter will be
in
itiated after the vehicle speed is above 8
mph
(
1
3 km/h). The rear view camera image will turn
off
when this counter reaches 10 seconds. The
counter will be reset when the vehicle speed is
8
mph (13 km/h) or below. If the vehicle speed
re
mains below 8
mph (13 km/h), the rear view
c
a
mera image will continue to be displayed until
4
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
the transmission is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the image
defeat X button is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
th
e image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position. Different colored zones indicate
the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The
following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up
on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located in the driver's door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
F
uel Filler Location
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door using the inside release
button. Do not pry on the door.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
Th
e Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2
m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when
backing up, especially in sunny weather condi
-
tions, since there may be a glare from the sun
at
certain angles that can make the image on
the touchscreen difficult to see.
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe –
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors
while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“
clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for five seconds to
allow nozzle to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
NOTE:
A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
sp
are tire area) to open the flapper doors to allow
for emergency refueling with a gas can.
EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR
R
ELEASE
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use
the fuel filler door emergency release located in
the trunk.
See the following steps to open the fuel door in
ca
se of an emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left
s
ide inner trim panel).
Access Cover
3. Pull the release cable.
R
elease Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown
on the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This
information should be used for passenger and
luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR).
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the drivers side B-pillar or the rear of the
driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc
-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
4
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
t
h
e VIN.
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR.
OVERLOADING
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed
the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and
ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale
to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute
the load evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
an
d shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
LOADING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store
heavier items down low and be sure you distribute
their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose
items securely before driving. If weighing the
loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded
either GAWR, but the total load is within the
specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's
GVWR and GAWRs
Ú page 111.
Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle's
proper tire pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
cov
erage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 112.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could
lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables, and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
you
r fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 112.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted
on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the
hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically
provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the
market today and they are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac
-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
de
aler for additional information.
4
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the
“T
ire and Loading Information” placard Ú page 223.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lb (454 kg) 100 lb (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lb (454 kg) 100 lb (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
we
ight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
ad
ds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor
-
mation” placard for the maximum combined
we
ight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Se
rvicing”
Ú page 193. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be diffi
-
cult for the driver to control. You could lose
c
ontrol of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis
-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure or
t
ires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue
and allow enough slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
Max loading as defined on the “Tire and
Loading Information” placard.
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
Th
e engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50
mph
(
8
0 km/h) and do not make starts at full
th
rottle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
4
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
For the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 223.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
se
ven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
ha
rness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into the
vehicle's electrical connectors) before
launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control (if equipped) to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
un
der heavy loading conditions will improve perfor
-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will
also provide better engine braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10
mph (16 km/h),
d
i
sengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
e
xample, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle
speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle
speed when grade and road conditions allow.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a tow dolly) is
NOT ALLOWED. The
only acceptable method for towing this vehicle
(behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with
all four wheels
OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
for a wedge of water to build up between the tire
and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning
and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle
control and stopping ability. To reduce this
possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
collision in a sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Di
fferential (LSD) that reduces, but does not
eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given
axle for improved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dan-
gerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pull-
ing of the front wheels. You could lose control of
t
he vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accel-
erate slowly and carefully whenever there is
l
ikely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud,
loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in inju
-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5
mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(
i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
4
120
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
pu
rposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
you
r vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or an authorized dealer may contact
you directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
ca
nnot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 78.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into your
vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali
-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle,
it
may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
MULTIMEDIA 121
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE
F
EATURES — UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV
S
ETTINGS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On
The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu
s
e
tting screen. In this menu, the Uconnect system
allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
se
ttings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
fou
nd within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio, along
with the selectable options pertaining to each
setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
122 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
la
nguages are English, Français, and Español.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
se
t it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
a
c
cess this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
MULTIMEDIA 123
Units
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in
the instrument cluster display and navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi,
kP
a, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement
independently.
5
124 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
Clock
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
Th
e “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system.
The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
wi
ll control the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
m
u
st be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
MULTIMEDIA 125
Camera
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
th
is setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-”
setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of
REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
5
126 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(F
CW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
se
tting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply brake pressure when
a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Active Braking
This setting will activate Forward Collision Warning Active Braking. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
de
tected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
se
ttings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
se
ttings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
MULTIMEDIA 127
Mirrors & Wipers
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Power Steering Default
This setting will adjust the power steering modes. Setting options are
“Normal”, “Sport”, and “Comfort”.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is place in REVERSE.
Setting Name Description
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE. Setting
opt
ions are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting
opt
ions are “On” and “Off”.
5
128 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to
shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the
Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 129
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
in
side.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the
Lock
button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob
. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
a
r
e needed to open all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the
driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will
unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
b
een linked to the key fob.
5
130 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort — If Equipped
Key Off Options
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has
been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started.
The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start”
setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All
Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5
min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
MULTIMEDIA 131
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
an
d left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
5
132 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Di
splay.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following settings
a
r
e “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and
“Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Projection Manager
This setting will activate your smartphone to project on the vehicle’s
touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 133
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
Restore Settings
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
mu
sic channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
di
splay of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Lin
k is a separate subscription.
When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default
settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
134 MULTIMEDIA
System Information — If Equipped
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
r
adio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is
8
inches (20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
gu
idelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wi
reless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio
Ú page 253.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
135
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
sy
stem detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
ch
aracteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Eq
uipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
wh
ile driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light is on.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer
-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual
-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro
-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
136 SAFETY
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the
light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Rain Brake
Su
pport (RBS) and Ready Alert Braking (RAB).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
com
es on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking
objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mod
e (if equipped). See Ú page 137 in this
section for a complete explanation of the available
E
SC modes.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from exces
-
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery sur-
faces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-
e
quipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeop
-
ardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
SAFETY 137
(Continued)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
loc
ated in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Wh
enever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
th
at wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeop
-
ardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent accidents resulting from
loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci
-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
ve
hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may nega
-
tively affect the performance of the ESC system.
Ch
anges to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improp
-
erly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
d
egrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifi-
cation or poor vehicle maintenance that
r
educes the effectiveness of the ESC system
can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING!
6
138 SAFETY
(Continued)
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
st
uck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to "ESC On" mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track" are
ESC “Partial Off” mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
us
e only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
hold the ESC OFF button for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After
five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
o
n
when the ignition is placed in the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section) has been disabled
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be
illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer
-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
n
ot engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable.
In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended
for off-highway or off-road use.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi
-
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
i
ncluding those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
WARNING!
SAFETY 139
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
st
arts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the
El
ectronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
t
u
rned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
e
quipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting using Uconnect
Settings, see
Ú page 121 for further information.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
6
140 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS
is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake system for
a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of
the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions
similarly to a limited slip differential and controls
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on
a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to
the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) are in reduced modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located
inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel
-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
ap
ply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
SAFETY 141
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3
.8
m). The zone length starts at the outside
r
e
arview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
(3
m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the
ve
hicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6
mph (10 km/h) or
hi
gher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
b
oth your vehicle and trailer before making a
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM
Warning Light randomly alerting on the trailer or
even remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear
Ú page 121.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors
are located. The system may also detect blockage
if the vehicle is operated in areas with extremely
low radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a
“Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The
system will automatically recover and resume
function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
de
tection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume if the corresponding turn signal is
activated
Ú page 143.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
t
hree different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
6
142 SAFETY
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
ei
ther side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 31
mph (50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
ve
hicle remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15
mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
Overtaking/Passing
SAFETY 143
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes
Ú page 253.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection —
If Equipped
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3
mph (5 km/h), to objects
mov
ing a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(3
2 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
bl
ocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
144 SAFETY
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
sy
stem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mod
e, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if
on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BS
M system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
vi
sual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mod
e when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION OPERATION —
I
F EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
look
ing sensors, as well as the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system, to calculate the probability of
a forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings and
may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does
not take action based upon these progressive
warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the
collision by braking but has not applied sufficient
brake force, the system will compensate and
provide additional brake force as required. If a
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20
mph (32 km/h), the
sy
stem may provide the maximum or partial
braking to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes.
FCW Message
SAFETY 145
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 253.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1
mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within an ignition cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti
-
vated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec
-
essary warnings due to the surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is on; this allows the
sy
stem to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is
loc
ated in "Uconnect Settings" under "Safety And
Driving Assistance". Forward Collision can be
checked or unchecked.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW
OFF" icon that appears in the instrument cluster
display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the
sy
stem from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
NOTE:
The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW
sy
stem state is kept in memory from one ignition
cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 121.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and
th
e Active Braking is set to “on”; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away
and it applies limited braking. This gives you the
most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
al
lows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you when you
are much closer. This setting provides less
reaction time than the “Far” setting, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW disables in the same manner as ACC, and
will display a screen indicating that the feature
is unavailable when it has been disabled.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
6
146 SAFETY
(Continued)
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Al
though the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
ab
out 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile
(1
.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
in
flation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 223 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
i
f
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
ti
re pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph
(2
4
km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
i
n
formation.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
co
ld (parked for more than three hours) placard
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS
sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket
wheels and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to
ensure proper TPMS feature operation.
SAFETY 147
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi
-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
ve
hicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu
-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
ha
s not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wi
reless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module
Ú page 253.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pr
essure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module.
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors.
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate in
th
e instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display an “Inflate to XX”
message and a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values
shown in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
CAUTION!
6
148 SAFETY
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those shown in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update,
the graphic display in the instrument cluster will
change color back to the original color, and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above
15
mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
t
h
is information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
"Service Tire Pressure System" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
re
peat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the "Service Tire
Pressure System" message will no longer display,
and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels
or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full
s
ize does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not
monitor the pressure in the compact spare
tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full
s
ize spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS
Warning Light will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different
color pressure value and an "Inflate to XX"
message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20
minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Lig
ht will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire
Pressure System” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
c
hime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
a
nd reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare or non-matching full size, the
TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the graphic
in the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as
no tire pressure is below the low- pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
SAFETY 149
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such
as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
ti
re assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
wi
ll chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "Service Tire Pressure System"
message will no longer be displayed as long as no
system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
s
e
ction may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
a
lways ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
v
ehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position
Ú page 163.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
r
ear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint
Ú page 163.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
b
ehind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
s
houlder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
v
ehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
6
150 SAFETY
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see
Ú page 250 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
th
ey can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
e
quipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
i
s first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
t
h
e vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
e
q
uipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
ac
tive when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
au
thorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
SAFETY 151
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
out
board front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you
have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not prop-
erly buckled up. You can strike the interior of
y
our vehicle or other passengers, or you can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you
and others in your vehicle are buckled up prop
-
erly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at
their seating position to minimize the risk of
severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instruc
-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
y
our passengers safe, too.
WARNING!
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap
belt for more than one person, no matter what
their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but
across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part
of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it
snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly.
In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure
the seat belt is flat against your body, without
twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your
vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immedi
-
ately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly
causing internal injuries. Always buckle your
seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
WARNING!
6
152 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
t
he latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under
the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t
as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest bones
will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certi
-
fied Collision Care Program facility for inspec-
tion.
WARNING!
SAFETY 153
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
c
lears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
pr
efer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
eq
uipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
6
154 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pr
egnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
be
lt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Re
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6
inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
SAFETY 155
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system
Ú page 171.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
e
ach seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. B
uckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2
. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
u
ntil the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
al
low it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
6
156 SAFETY
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with
the following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
pa
rts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
re
lated gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
SAFETY 157
(Continued)
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Su
pplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 70.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
du
ring an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
cou
ld cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort
-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wh
eel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
158 SAFETY
(Continued)
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
loc
ation of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
col
lisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
de
tects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
pa
ssenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
SAFETY 159
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
S
e
at-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
in
jury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
out
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
La
bel Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
6
160 SAFETY
(Continued)
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
c
e
rtain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
col
lisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
re
straint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after
-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
ro
of racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
v
ehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
c
ol
lisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu
-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
s
it upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
SAFETY 161
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
tr
im, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
de
signed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
com
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
th
e internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo
-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
t
h
e air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu
-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme
-
diately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
6
162 SAFETY
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15
minutes
f
r
om the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of
these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
th
e STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an autho
-
rized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
SAFETY 163
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data
as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
un
derstanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non
-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi
-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
ag
e, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
eq
uipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo
-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
6
164 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
ha
ve not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
c
hild restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
be
lt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
ou
t
grown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
ve
hicle
SAFETY 165
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
for
ward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac
-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
i
nfant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
6
166 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
b
ack of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
t
rip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no”,
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
An
chors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
A
n
chors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Te
ther Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
R
e
straint
More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
SAFETY 167
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
an
chorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
168 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
re
straint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
ch
ild and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
at
tach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
s
y
stem to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat
owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH
an
chorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
re
straints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
pa
ssenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if
t
h
e child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
SAFETY 169
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cu
shion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
loc
ated in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window. They are
found under a plastic cover with the tether
anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. See Ú page 170
for typical installation instructions.
6
170 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 171 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. L
oosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
o
n the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
i
t to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 172 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. T
ighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1
inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac
-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
i
nfant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
SAFETY 171
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 155 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
s
e
ctions for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Ch
ild Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
in
stall a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
pa
ssenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
r
e
straint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the
belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
6
172 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
s
eating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
r
etractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
i
s locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is
not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 172 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. T
est that the child restraint is installed tightly
b
y pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1
inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
t
he belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See
Ú page 167 for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
ve
hicle.
SAFETY 173
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor
d
irectly behind the seat where you are placing
the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
d
irect path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
t
he child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Attachment
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
head restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
r
estraint to the center tether anchorage
located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
2 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli
-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
6
174 SAFETY
(Continued)
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
sw
itch is first placed in the ON/RUN position. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected
at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After
the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System
has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 149.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
you
r floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
SAFETY 175
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
a
dditional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
e
ngine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter
-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
s
ecure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING!
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
176 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
ex
haust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
w
i
ndows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
177
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the switch bank just above the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Fl
ashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
as
sistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
ma
y discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 253.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and SiriusXM Guardian™ services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
7
178 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
con
nect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you
will be connected to a representative for assis
-
tance. Roadside Assistance will know what
ve
hicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mi
rror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
th
ere will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and
S
OS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn
green once a connection to a SOS operator has
been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
S
OS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur
-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
sy
stem will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper
-
ator terminates the connection.
5. T
he SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and SiriusXM Guardian™ services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 179
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO
NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi
-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer”.
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer”.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after
-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI
-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SE
RVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rear-
view Mirror light is illuminated, have an autho-
rized dealer service the SOS Call system
i
m
mediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
7
180 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
tion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
t
he equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
ca
n immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and SiriusXM Guardian™ services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 181
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4
. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5
. T
urn the ignition to the OFF position.
6
. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
d
iagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
th
e vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The jack, spare tire and fuel funnel are stowed
under an access cover in the trunk.
Fuel Funnel Location
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to access
th
e jack.
Follow these steps to access the jack and spare
tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3
. R
otate the fastener securing the spare tire
c
ounterclockwise to remove it.
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5
. Rotate the fastener securing the jack counter-
c
lockwise to remove it.
Jack Fastener
7
182 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly
from under the spare tire. Turn the jack screw
to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and
remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
JACKING AND CHANGING A TIRE
Jacking Warning Label
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See the following images for proper
jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set an auto-
matic transmission in PARK.
Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 183
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the
c
enter cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug
wrench to pry the center cap off carefully
before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is
c
losest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with
the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
th
e jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
184 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire and install the spare tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7
. Mount the spare tire.
M
ounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install
a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare
Ú page 234.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of
the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the lug nuts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
j
ack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down
on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts
in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been
tightened twice. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station
Ú page 243.
11. S
tow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the
b
ase of the jack faces the front of the vehicle
before tightening down the fastener.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 185
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
th
e manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery posts are located on the
right side of the engine compartment for jump
starting.
Jump Starting Locations
NOTE:
The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on
the right side of the vehicle looking over the
fender. The positive battery post may be covered
with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off
fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which
has a positive
(+) symbol on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump
st
arting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and cycle the ignition
to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
a
ccessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover
over the remote positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake, and make
sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Remote Negative (-) Post
Remote Positive (+) Post
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
7
186 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
ca
bles are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. C
onnect the positive
(
+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive
(+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (
+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(
-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(
-)
jumper cable to the remote negative
(-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle) located directly behind the
under-hood fuse box.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
b
ooster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
n
ection procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. D
isconnect the negative
(
-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative
(-)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (
-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (
+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(
+)
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post
of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote
p
ositive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system tested at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN AN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for
a Cap-Less Fuel System. The funnel is located
under the access cover in the trunk
Ú page 181. If
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
ga
s can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler
neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with
the funnel to avoid spills.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 rpm since it provides no charging benefit,
w
a
stes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 187
(Continued)
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door using the inside release
button. Do not pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
fu
nnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling:
1. R
etrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
d
oors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
e
n
gine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc
-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING!
7
188 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
im
pending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the
M
anual Park Release lever.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish
t
he tether strap up through the opening in the
console base.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver's seat with your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 189
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the
center of the lever, and disengage the lever
locking tab by pushing it to the right.
Engaging The Lever
6. While holding the locking tab in the
disengaged position, pull the tether strap to
rotate the lever up and rearward, until it locks
in place in the vertical position. The vehicle is
now out of PARK and can be moved. Release
the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. P
ush the latch (at the base of the lever, on the
re
ar side) rearward (away from the lever) to
unlatch the lever.
Disengaging The Lever
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward
and down, to its original position, until the
locking tab snaps into place to secure the
lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm
that the lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console. Reinstall the console storage bin.
When the lever is in the release position the access
cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then, shift
back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while
gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts to
free a stuck vehicle.
7
190 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5
mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 137.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OF
F button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30
mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec-
onds continuously without stopping when you
a
re stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis
-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
s
tuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15
mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30
mph (48 km/h)
wh
ile in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
ring).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 191
(Continued)
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
pr
event damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery
is
discharged, instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK for towing
Ú page 188.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED
(but, if used, same limitations as flat tow)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
Ignition in ON/RUN mode
Transmission in
NEUTRAL (NOT in PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
FCA US LLC does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
CAUTION!
7
192 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable,
AWD models can also be towed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL
(N) (not in PARK!), and the rear wheels
OFF the
ground with no limitation on speed or distance.
Since the ignition MUST be in the ON/RUN mode to
tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must be towed
with ALL FOUR wheels
OFF the ground (e.g. on a
flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
REAR WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) MODELS
FCA LLC US recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, this vehicle may be flat
towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 188.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
m
ust be towed faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or
f
a
rther than 30 miles (48 km), then the only
ac
ceptable method of towing is with a flatbed
truck.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 162.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle
Ú page 163.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method
can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
193
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for the vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil”
or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500
miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
in
tervals exceed 10,000
miles (16,000 km),
1
2
months or 350 hours of engine run time,
wh
ichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before your next
s
cheduled service.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering (if
equipped) and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
194 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 195
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel
D
r
ive Only).
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc
b
r
akes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(2
40,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
8
196 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. (All
Wheel Drive Only).
X X
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel
D
rive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer
towing.
X X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 197
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Fill
8
198 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 199
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every month.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about
five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut
off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
ma
rkings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading
is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in
the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to
check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a
few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply
some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the
wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters)
of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer
Fluid” appears in the instrument cluster.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
NOTE:
The battery is stored under an access cover in the
tr
unk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting
Ú page 184.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 184.
8
200 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
sy
stems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L And 5.7L
Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup
an
d then quiet down after approximately 30
seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
h
a
nds after handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only
be replaced with a battery of the same type
(vented).
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
WARNING!
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 201
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine
continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum
In
stitute (API). The manufacturer only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W
-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals for
oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
en
gine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type
di
sposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should
be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar®
engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 193.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
fi
lters varies considerably. Only high quality filters
should be used to ensure most efficient service.
Mopar® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality
filter and are recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
8
202 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
s
u
bstance. The manufacturer recommends that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
com
pressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydroflu-
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
E
n
vironmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
com
pressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
under the hood, behind a removable panel in the
cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to
the windshield wipers. When installing a new cabin
air filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by
p
ressing the retaining clips.
Access Door
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
a
i
r conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, for further warranty infor
-
mation.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
p
e
rsonal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 203
(Continued)
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the cabin air filter
access cover.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used cabin air filter.
4
. I
nstall the new cabin air filter with arrows
p
ointing in the direction of airflow, which is
toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows
on the cabin air filter will indicate this).
Cabin Air Filter
5. Close the cabin air filter access cover.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 193.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced.
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,
frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip
-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to
perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
WARNING!
8
204 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
tw
ice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat
-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
th
ese conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 205
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
a
rm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. S
lide the wiper blade down towards the base
of
the wiper arm.
4. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade down toward the
base of the wiper arm and away from the J
hook in the end of the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
I
nstalling The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab
open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
a
ssembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade under
the locking tab.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
8
206 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
4. Slide the wiper blade onto the arm until motion
stops, then fold down the locking tab to
secure.
NOTE:
The locking tab will not snap into place until the
bl
ade is properly positioned on the wiper arm hook.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
sy
stem; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
c
on
verter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
sy
stems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
ma
lfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon
-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
av
oid breathing CO
Ú page 176.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
c
ontact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera
-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
c
ould cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
CAUTION!
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 207
(Continued)
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the igni-
tion when the transmission is in gear and the
ve
hicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diag-
nostic testing, or for prolonged periods during
v
ery rough idle or malfunctioning operating
conditions.
NOTE:
Your vehicle’s exhaust system may be equipped
wi
th an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if
the exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket
products a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will
illuminate.
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather,
wh
ere applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle
ru
bber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
pr
operly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
con
tains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 193.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 247.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat
-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
in
troduced into the cooling system in an emer
-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho
-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi
-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
c
ontrolled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
WARNING!
8
208 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Or
ganic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
For
mula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
da
mage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if
equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is
any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 209
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested
by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method
for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
th
ere is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
ma
intain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
c
om
ing from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
sh
ows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro
-
sion protection of your engine which contains
al
uminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
O
ther designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically
Ú page 193.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
8
210 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light
indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when
pe
rforming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to
the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the
master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it
may cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been recommended
by the manufacturer, and has been kept in a tightly
closed container to avoid contamination from
foreign matter or moisture
Ú page 249.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid Ú page 249. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
s
ystem and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in a open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
cou
ld be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 211
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
Howe
ver, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer's specified
transmission fluid
Ú page 249. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
u
sing the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
u
s
ed.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The All Wheel Drive system consists of a transfer
case and front differential. The exterior surface of
these components should be inspected for
evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks should be
repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is
loc
ated in the middle of the rear housing. To
inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the
fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should be even
with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add
fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
cover near the half shaft attachment. To inspect
the differential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The
fluid level should be even with or slightly below the
bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 193.
REAR AXLE
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level
Ú page 249.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder
Ú page 249.
8
212 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in
the engine compartment. This module contains
fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and
descriptions are printed on the inside of the power
distribution center cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
Front Power Distribution Center
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/ functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/ not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 213
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
F03 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 *
F04 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F05 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brake
F06 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brake
F07 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module *
F10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) * / Under Hood Lamp – Police
F11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID Headlamp *
8
214 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID Headlamp *
F18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
F19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
F21
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
–
Headlamp Washers *
Police Bat Feed #2
F23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
F28 – – Spare
F29 – 15 Amp Blue Auto Trans (Challenger / Charger Police)
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 – 25 Amp Clear ASD Feed #1
F35 – 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2
F36 – 10 Amp Red
Anti-Lock Brake Module / Steering Column Lock Module
(3
00 *)
F37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller
F38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F39 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch / EPS */ Vacuum Pump *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 215
Rear Interior Fuses
There is also a power distribution center located in
the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This
center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity
location and descriptions are printed on the inside
of the power distribution center cover.
Rear Power Distribution Center
F48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module / Front Axle Disconnect *
F49 – – Spare
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump *
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise Control *
F53 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other
than indicated may result in a dangerous elec
-
trical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
c
ontinues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected.
8
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F02 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
F03 – – Spare
F04 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
F05
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
F06 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
F07 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
F08 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
F09 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
F10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
F11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter/IP APO/RR USB (Selectable Fuse) *
F15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
F16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
F17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
F18 30 Amp Pink – VISM Mod (Police)
F19 – – Spare
F20 – – Spare
F21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L SRT)
F22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Module
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
F23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door * / Diagnostic Port
F24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
F25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor System
F26 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Mod (Charger Non- Police/300)
F27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier *
F31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats *
F32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
IGN SW/Wireless Mod/Steer Clmn Lock Mod/Remote
Start *
F34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock (300)
F35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F36 – 15 Amp Blue Active Exhaust Valve *
F37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
F38 – 20 Amp Yellow Media Hub / Console APO
F42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats * / Heated Steering Wheel *
F44 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera
F45 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Lane Departure
F46 – – Spare
F47 – 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time Running Lamps *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F49 – – Spare
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated / Vented Seats *
F52 – 10 Amp Red
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders/Rear Heated Seat Switches *
F53 – 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – – Spare
F63 – – Spare
F64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
F65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F66 – – Spare
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RearView Mirror /
Po
lice Run Acc Relay
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
F68 – 10 Amp Red Rear USB Timer / Rear Sunshade *
F69 – – Spare
F70 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
8
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID)
HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the
ignition turned to the OFF position.
Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
th
e headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue
to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more
white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
system charges.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) 9005HL+
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PSY24WSV
Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Side marker Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Side marker Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
License LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp
switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced
properly. See an authorized dealer for service.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
BI-HALOGEN LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
HEADLAMP — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
ne
cessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access
t
he headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grab the cap and rotate it counter-
c
lockwise to unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counter-
clockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp
as
sembly.
Headlamp Bulb Location
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly
a
nd install the replacement bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the
headlamp assembly, and then turn it
clockwise.
7. Reinstall the access cap making sure it is
seated into the housing and turn cap
clockwise to engage locking lugs. Visually, you
should be unable to see the blue O-ring gasket.
The access cap should be uniformly seated
and you should not be able to pull the access
cap off without turning it counterclockwise.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
CAUTION!
If the access cap is not installed correctly after
bulb replacement, the lamp becomes
susceptible to dust, condensation, and water
intrusion. This may ultimately lead to an
inoperative lamp. If the access cap cannot be
installed correctly, please return to an
authorized dealer for proper repair or access
cap replacement if necessary.
8
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
ne
cessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access
t
he turn signal (inboard) bulb cap.
Turn Signal Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grab the cap and rotate it counter-
c
lockwise to unlock it.
Turn Signal Bulb Location
4. S
queeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb
s
ocket and pull straight out from the lamp
assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector
a
nd install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly
straight into the lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp
housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must
be replaced as an assembly; see an authorized
dealer.
FRONT/REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Side Markers must be
replaced as an assembly, see an authorized
dealer.
REAR BACKUP LAMP AND TURN SIGNAL
LAMPS
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use LED
sources that are not serviceable separately. The
Rear Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, see
an authorized dealer for further information.
LICENSE LAMP
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized
dealer.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized
dealer.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
s
t
andard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"
P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“
S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
8
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of
three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
pl
acard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
ori
ginal equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
th
e driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
th
e spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
t
he:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. T
ire size designed for your vehicle.
4
. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
a
nd spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
“Vehicle Loading”
Ú page 111.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
ax
le weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
an
d trailer towing
Ú page 111.
8
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
av
ailable amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
lu
ggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
th
ere will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu
-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
a
nd may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
re
sistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
a
b
normal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
s
itting for a minimum of 3 hours. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
K
eep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
an
d the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
a
nd additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
ra
pid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after being driven in a Run Flat
mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the
TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
8
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the
ve
hicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring section for more
in
formation.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30
mph
(
4
8 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
con
tinuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 189.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6
mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
de
velop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
in
stalling new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
li
ttle exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú page 232. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Ve
hicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Sa
fety Information” section of this manual for
more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
Ú page 223.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
t
wo rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
de
aler or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre
-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
su
spension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over
-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
h
ave a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
8
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
eq
uipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
wh
at was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75
mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(1
20 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
au
thorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 116.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
e
quipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
e
q
uipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tempo-
rary emergency use only. With these spares, do
not
drive more than 50
mph (80 km/h). Tempo-
rary use spares have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for tempo-
rary emergency use only. With these spares, do
not
drive more than 50
mph (80 km/h). Tempo-
rary use spares have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
ex
tended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gl
oss Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limited use spare
wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pres
-
sures listed on your Tire and Loading Information
Pl
acard located on the driver’s side B-pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners
and automatic car washes may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not cov
-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
ca
r wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equiva
-
lent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These prod
-
ucts may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
RWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
pr
ojection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Touring Rear
P215/65R17
P225/60R18
Peerless Chain Super Z6 Low Profile
or
Equivalent
300C
300S
NONE
NONE
Limited Rear P225/60R18
Peerless Chain Super Z6 Low Profile
or
Equivalent
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
pr
ojection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Touring
300S
Limited
Rear
235/55R19
P235/55R19
S Class
8
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons
for
any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed
Ú page 193.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cr
oss” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
com
ponents, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Au
tosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30
mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more
than 3 weeks, you may want to take these steps to
protect your battery.
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri
-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
da
mage when the system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
8
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
en
able you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
th
erefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
an
d reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use care to never the
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
t
h
at will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of
paint and decals.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
a
s possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar® Total
Cl
ean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do
not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash
them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
p
l
astic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
sh
ow any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends
Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a
cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
seats, as damage to the seat may result.
243
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument
panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. There will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This may be evident by increased
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force
required to slow or stop, and potential activation of
the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
ex
ample, repeated brake applications with the
engine OFF), the brakes will still function. The
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(1
76
N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
9
244 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
ch
ecked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
tor
que to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane
number can cause engine failure and may void the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
ex
cellent fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded regular
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as specified
by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of higher octane
premium gasoline will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
sa
tisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
89 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of
89 octane plus gasoline is recommended for
optimum performance and fuel economy.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 245
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
fu
rther aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
s
hould be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
con
taining more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
sion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
246 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasolines to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
sy
stem can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis
-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho
-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
c
oncentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi
-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
t
h
e New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 247
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
5.7L Engine – without Severe Duty II Cooling System 14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
5.7L Engine – with Severe Duty II Cooling System 15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(2
40,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
r
e
quirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Mopar®, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix Ultra. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
9
248 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil
Fi
lter is unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 method, 0-15% ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 method, 0-15%
ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
c
ooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 249
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
e
quivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90
(API GL-5).
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Mopar® OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(A
PI GL-5).
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner
44
–40.
9
250
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
de
aler. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
de
aler’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
ce
nter should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
F
rench
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 251
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
the FCA US LLC has installed special TDD
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or
speech impaired customer, who has access to a
TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the FCA US
LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the
mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
con
tract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
in
vestment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/
om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
p
rovisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
252 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Ve
hicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
com
plete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
d
iagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 253
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
th
e assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
In
formation Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
an
d with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
i
nterference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`
Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
e
t
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
si
guientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by
the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
254
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.........................................243
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)............................................................ 93
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............208
Adding Fuel....................................................110
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................199
Additives, Fuel ...............................................245
Adjust
Forward ....................................................... 29
Rearward..................................................... 29
Air Bag ...........................................................157
Advance Front Air Bag...............................157
Air Bag Operation ......................................158
Air Bag Warning Light................................156
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................159
Enhanced Accident Response......... 162, 192
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................192
Front Air Bag .............................................157
If Deployment Occurs................................161
Knee Impact Bolsters................................158
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............163
Maintenance .............................................163
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............157
Side Air Bags .............................................159
Transporting Pets......................................174
Air Bag Light.................................. 71, 156, 174
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ............................................................ 201
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 202
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 202
Air Conditioner System ...........................47, 202
Air Conditioning Filter..............................50, 202
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................50
Air Filter ........................................................ 201
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 230
Alarm
Arm The System ...................................18, 19
Rearm The System ......................................19
Security Alarm ......................................18, 73
Alarm System
Security Alarm .............................................18
All Wheel Drive
Towing ...................................................... 192
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................................... 211
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................... 8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 207, 247
Disposal ................................................... 209
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 135
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................73
Arming System
Security Alarm .............................................18
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 139
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 120
Auto Down Power Windows..............................56
Automatic Door Locks......................................22
Automatic Headlights.......................................41
Automatic High Beams.....................................41
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............49
Automatic Transmission...................................86
Adding Fluid..................................... 211, 249
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 211
Fluid Change............................................. 211
Fluid Level Check.............................210, 211
Fluid Type ........................................211, 249
Special Additives ...................................... 210
Automatic Transmission Limp HomeMode ..22, 88
AutoPark ..........................................................81
Autostick
Operation.....................................................89
AUX Cord ..........................................................52
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........54
AWD
Towing ...................................................... 192
Axle Fluid....................................................... 249
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 249
255
B
Back-Up .........................................................109
Battery....................................................72, 199
Charging System Light................................. 72
Keyless Key Fob Replacement.................... 13
Location ....................................................199
Belts, Seat .....................................................174
Beverage Holder Cooled (Cupholder) .............. 53
Beverage Holder Heated (Cupholder) .............. 53
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................204
B-Pillar Location.............................................227
Brake Assist System ......................................136
Brake Control System ....................................136
Brake Fluid .......................................... 210, 249
Brake System ...................................... 209, 243
Fluid Check ..................................... 210, 249
Master Cylinder .........................................210
Parking........................................................ 83
Warning Light .....................................71, 243
Brake/Transmission Interlock ......................... 85
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle....... 83
Brightness, Interior Lights................................ 44
Bulb Replacement.........................................219
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 175, 219
C
Camera, Rear ................................................109
Capacities, Fluid ............................................247
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 197
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 208
Car Washes................................................... 240
Carbon Monoxide Warning............................ 176
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ........................................ 111
Cargo Area Cover .............................................61
Cargo Compartment ........................................61
Cellular Phone .............................................. 134
Certification Label......................................... 111
Chains, Tire................................................... 237
Chart, Tire Sizing........................................... 224
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)................................................................78
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 173
Checks, Safety .............................................. 173
Child Restraint .............................................. 163
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 166
Child Seat Installation .............................. 172
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 170
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 165
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.. 167
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 165
Seating Positions...................................... 166
Child Safety Locks ...........................................22
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 244
Cleaning
Wheels...................................................... 236
Climate Control .........................................46, 47
Automatic ....................................................47
Coin Holder ......................................................51
Cold Weather Operation...................................82
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 234
Console
Floor ............................................................51
Contract, Service........................................... 251
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 208
Cooling System ............................................. 207
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 208
Coolant Capacity....................................... 247
Coolant Level...................................207, 209
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 209
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 207
Inspection................................................. 209
Points To Remember ................................ 209
Pressure Cap ............................................ 208
Radiator Cap............................................. 208
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).....207, 247
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 240
Cruise Control (Speed Control)..................91, 93
Cruise Light...............................................76, 77
Customer Assistance .................................... 250
Cybersecurity ................................................ 120
11
256
D
Daytime Running Lights................................... 40
Dealer Service ...............................................200
Deck Lid
Power Release ............................................ 60
Defroster, Windshield....................................174
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........................... 77
Dimmer Switch
Headlight.....................................................41
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)................................................199
Disable Vehicle Towing..................................191
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).......................209
Door Ajar.......................................................... 72
Door Ajar Light................................................. 72
Door Locks
Automatic.................................................... 22
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors.... 22
Doors............................................................... 19
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 27
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .....................................118
E
Electric Brake Control System .......................136
Anti-Lock Brake System.............................135
Electronic Roll Mitigation................. 136, 140
Electric Remote Mirrors................................... 35
Electronic Power Distribution Center
(Fuses).......................................................... 212
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)........92
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 137
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.........72
Emergency Gas Can Refueling...................... 186
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck..................... 189
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 177
Jacking ..................................................... 180
Jump Starting .................................. 184, 185
Towing ...................................................... 191
Emission Control System Maintenance ...........78
Engine.................................................. 197, 198
Air Cleaner................................................ 201
Block Heater................................................83
Break-In Recommendations........................83
Checking Oil Level .................................... 199
Compartment .................................. 197, 198
Compartment Identification...................... 197
Coolant (Antifreeze)......................... 207, 247
Cooling ..................................................... 207
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 176
Fails To Start ...............................................82
Flooded, Starting .........................................82
Fuel Requirements ................................... 244
Jump Starting .................................. 184, 185
Oil .................................................... 200, 247
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 197
Oil Filter .................................................... 201
Oil Selection.....................................200, 247
Oil Synthetic.............................................. 201
Overheating .............................................. 187
Starting........................................................80
Enhanced Accident Response Feature... 162, 192
Ethanol.......................................................... 245
Exhaust Gas Cautions................................... 176
Exhaust System ................................... 176, 206
Exterior Lighting ...............................................40
Exterior Lights ........................................ 40, 175
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 201
Air Conditioning ................................. 50, 202
Engine Oil ........................................ 201, 247
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 201
Flashers ........................................................ 177
Hazard Warning ........................................ 177
Turn Signals................................ 42, 77, 175
Flash-To-Pass...................................................41
Flooded Engine Starting...................................82
Floor Console ...................................................51
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 247
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 175
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................ 210
Cooling System ......................................... 207
Engine Oil ................................................. 199
Transfer Case ........................................... 211
257
Fluid, Brake ...................................................249
Fog Lights ........................................................ 42
Fold-Flat Seats................................................. 27
Folding Rear Seats .......................................... 27
Forward Collision Warning.............................144
Four-Way Hazard Flasher...............................177
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................189
Fuel ...............................................................244
Additives ...................................................245
Clean Air....................................................244
Ethanol......................................................245
Gasoline ....................................................244
Gauge.......................................................... 74
Materials Added........................................245
Methanol...................................................245
Octane Rating ................................. 244, 247
Requirements ...........................................244
Specifications............................................247
Tank Capacity............................................247
Fuses.............................................................212
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....................37
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................244
Gasoline, Reformulated.................................244
Gauges
Fuel ............................................................. 74
Gear Ranges.................................................... 86
Glass Cleaning...............................................242
Gross Axle Weight Rating ..................... 112, 113
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating......................... 112
GVWR............................................................ 112
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water ....................... 118
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................. 177
Head Restraints........................................32, 33
Head Rests ............................................... 32, 33
Headlights .................................................... 220
Automatic ....................................................41
Cleaning ................................................... 240
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........41
Lights On Reminder.....................................42
On With Wipers............................................41
Passing........................................................41
Switch..........................................................40
Time Delay...................................................42
Washers ................................................... 199
Heated Mirrors.................................................36
Heated Seats...................................................30
Heater, Engine Block .......................................83
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ..............................................................41
Hill Start Assist.............................................. 139
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 114
Holder, Coin .....................................................51
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................37
Hood Prop ........................................................59
Hood Release...................................................59
I
Ignition.............................................................15
Switch..........................................................15
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 34, 177
Instrument Cluster ....................................63, 65
Descriptions.................................................77
Display..................................................65, 67
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 241
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 241
Interior Lights...................................................43
J
Jack Location ................................................ 181
Jack Operation .............................................. 182
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 182
Jump Starting....................................... 184, 185
K
Key Fob
Arm The System...........................................18
Unlatch The Trunk .......................................13
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................13
11
258
Keyless Enter 'n Go™................................ 20, 80
Enter The Trunk........................................... 13
Passive Entry............................................... 20
Passive Entry Programming......................... 20
Keys................................................................. 12
Replacement............................................... 14
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals........................ 42
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 43
LaneSense ....................................................107
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................151
Latches..........................................................175
Hood ........................................................... 59
Lead Free Gasoline........................................244
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................175
Life Of Tires ...................................................232
Light Bulbs........................................... 175, 219
Lights.............................................................175
Air Bag.......................................71, 156, 174
Automatic Headlights.................................. 41
Brake Assist Warning ................................138
Brake Warning ...................................71, 243
Bulb Replacement.....................................219
Cruise................................................... 76, 77
Daytime Running......................................... 40
Dimmer Switch, Headlight.................... 40, 41
Engine Temperature Warning...................... 72
Exterior......................................................175
Fog .............................................................. 42
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 177
Headlight Switch..........................................40
Headlights ...................................40, 42, 220
Headlights On With Wipers..........................41
High Beam...................................................41
High Beam/Low Beam Select......................41
Instrument Cluster.......................................40
Intensity Control ..........................................44
Interior.........................................................43
License..................................................... 222
Lights On Reminder.....................................42
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)..........74
Map .............................................................43
Park......................................................41, 77
Passing........................................................41
Reading .......................................................43
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................71
Security Alarm .............................................73
Service ..................................................... 219
Traction Control........................................ 138
Turn Signals .........................40, 42, 77, 175
Vanity Mirror................................................34
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .....................................72, 77
Load Leveling System ......................................62
Load Shed Battery Saver On............................69
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............69
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor...............69
Loading Vehicle.................................... 111, 112
Capacities................................................. 112
Tires.......................................................... 227
Locks
Auto Unlock .................................................22
Automatic Door............................................22
Child Protection ...........................................22
Power Door ..................................................20
Low Tire Pressure System............................. 146
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 204
Lug Nuts........................................................ 243
M
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 199
Maintenance Schedule ........................ 193, 194
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....74
Manual
Park Release ............................................ 188
Service...................................................... 252
Media Hub .......................................................52
Memory Feature (Memory Seats).....................27
Memory Seat....................................................27
Memory Seats And Radio.................................27
Methanol....................................................... 245
Mirrors .............................................................34
Electric Powered..........................................35
Electric Remote ...........................................35
Heated.........................................................36
259
Outside........................................................35
Rearview ............................................34, 177
Vanity .......................................................... 34
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .......................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................146
Mopar Parts...................................................252
MP3 Control .................................................... 52
Multi-Function Control Lever............................ 40
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period............................ 83
O
Occupant Restraints......................................149
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 244, 247
Oil Change Indicator ........................................ 66
Reset........................................................... 66
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................201
Oil Filter, Selection.........................................201
Oil Pressure Light ............................................ 73
Oil, Engine ........................................... 200, 247
Capacity ....................................................247
Checking ...................................................199
Dipstick .....................................................199
Disposal ....................................................201
Filter................................................ 201, 247
Filter Disposal ...........................................201
Identification Logo.....................................201
Materials Added To ...................................201
Pressure Warning Light ...............................73
Recommendation............................ 200, 247
Synthetic .................................................. 201
Viscosity ................................................... 247
Onboard Diagnostic System.............................77
Operating Precautions .....................................77
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual........................................ 252
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................35
Overheating, Engine...................................... 187
P
Paddle Shift Mode ...........................................89
Paddle Shifters ................................................89
Paint Care..................................................... 240
Parking Brake ..................................................83
ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 102
Passive Entry ...................................................20
Pets .............................................................. 174
Placard, Tire And Loading Information.......... 227
Power
Brakes ...................................................... 243
Deck Lid Release.........................................60
Distribution Center (Fuses)....................... 215
Door Locks ..................................................20
Mirrors.........................................................35
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................54
Seats ...........................................................28
Steering.......................................................91
Sunroof........................................................57
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column................24
Windows ......................................................56
Power Seats
Forward .......................................................29
Lumbar ........................................................29
Rearward .....................................................29
Recline.........................................................29
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 154
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 180
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 154
R
Radial Ply Tires.............................................. 231
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)............ 208
Radio Operation............................................ 134
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................46
Rear Axle (Differential).................................. 211
Rear Camera................................................. 109
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 143
Rear ParkSense System................................ 102
Rear Seats, Folding..........................................27
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
Towing ...................................................... 192
Recreational Towing...................................... 118
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 244
Refrigerant.................................................... 202
Release, Hood..................................................59
Reminder, Lights On ........................................42
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 150
11
260
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm............................................. 18
Unlatch The Trunk ....................................... 13
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 17
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features..................................................17
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 17
Remote Trunk Release .................................... 60
Replacement Bulbs .......................................219
Replacement Keys........................................... 14
Replacement Tires.........................................233
Reporting Safety Defects...............................252
Restraints, Child ............................................163
Restraints, Head....................................... 32, 33
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .........................189
Rotation, Tires ...............................................238
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.........................174
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................175
Safety Defects, Reporting..............................252
Safety Information, Tire .................................223
Safety Tips.....................................................173
Safety, Exhaust Gas.......................................176
Schedule, Maintenance....................... 193, 194
Seat Belt Reminder ......................................... 71
Seat Belts ............................................ 150, 174
Adjustable Shoulder Belt.......................... 153
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..... 153
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage............................................ 153
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........... 155
Child Restraints........................................ 163
Energy Management Feature ................... 155
Extender ................................................... 154
Front Seat...............................150, 151, 152
Inspection................................................. 174
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 152
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 153
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 151
Operating Instructions.............................. 152
Pregnant Women...................................... 154
Pretensioners ........................................... 154
Rear Seat ................................................. 151
Reminder.................................................. 150
Seat Belt Extender.................................... 154
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 154
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 153
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 241
Seats ................................................. 27, 29, 30
Adjustment ...........................................27, 29
Easy Entry....................................................30
Head Restraints....................................32, 33
Heated.........................................................30
Height Adjustment .......................................28
Power...........................................................28
Rear Folding ................................................27
Seatback Release........................................27
Tilting....................................................27, 28
Vented .........................................................32
Ventilated ....................................................32
Security Alarm...........................................18, 73
Arm The System...........................................18
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 247
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................14
Sentry Key Replacement..................................14
Service Assistance ........................................ 250
Service Contract............................................ 251
Service Manuals ........................................... 252
Shifting.............................................................84
Automatic Transmission .......................84, 86
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 151
Side View Mirror Adjustment............................35
Signals, Turn ................................... 42, 77, 175
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 237
Snow Tires .................................................... 234
Spare Tires..................................181, 234, 235
Spark Plugs................................................... 247
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline).......................................... 247
Oil ............................................................. 247
261
Speed Control
Accel/Decel................................................. 92
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............................... 96
Cancel ......................................................... 93
Resume....................................................... 93
Set............................................................... 92
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......... 91, 92, 93
Sport Mode...................................................... 90
Starting............................................................ 80
Automatic Transmission.............................. 80
Button ......................................................... 15
Cold Weather .............................................. 82
Engine Fails To Start ................................... 82
Starting And Operating .................................... 80
Starting Procedures......................................... 80
Steering ...........................................................23
Column Lock ............................................... 23
Power .......................................................... 91
Tilt Column ........................................... 23, 24
Wheel, Heated............................................. 24
Wheel, Tilt ............................................ 23, 24
Storage..........................................................239
Storage, Vehicle......................................50, 239
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................239
Stuck, Freeing ...............................................189
Sun Roof.......................................................... 57
Sunglasses Storage.........................................52
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag.....157
Synthetic Engine Oil.......................................201
T
Telescoping Steering Column ...................23, 24
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............49
Tilt Steering Column .................................23, 24
Time Delay
Headlight.....................................................42
Tire And Loading Information Placard........... 227
Tire Markings................................................ 223
Tire Safety Information ................................. 223
Tires...................................175, 230, 234, 238
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 232
Air Pressure .............................................. 230
Chains ...................................................... 237
Changing ......................................... 180, 182
Compact Spare......................................... 234
General Information ........................ 230, 234
High Speed............................................... 231
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 230
Jacking ..................................................... 182
Life Of Tires .............................................. 232
Load Capacity........................................... 227
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..75, 146
Quality Grading......................................... 238
Radial ....................................................... 231
Replacement ............................................ 233
Rotation.................................................... 238
Safety .............................................. 223, 230
Sizes......................................................... 224
Snow Tires ................................................ 234
Spare Tires .............................181, 234, 235
Spinning ................................................... 232
Trailer Towing ........................................... 116
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 232
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 243
To Open Hood ..................................................59
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 115
Towing........................................................... 112
Behind A Motorhome................................ 118
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 191
Guide ........................................................ 114
Recreational ............................................. 118
Weight ...................................................... 114
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 118
Traction......................................................... 118
Traction Control ............................................ 140
Trailer Towing................................................ 112
Hitches ..................................................... 114
Minimum Requirements ........................... 115
Tips........................................................... 117
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 115
Wiring ....................................................... 116
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 114
Trailer Weight................................................ 114
Transfer Case
Fluid................................................. 211, 249
Maintenance ............................................ 211
11
262
Transmission ................................................... 86
Automatic...........................................86, 210
Fluid ..........................................................249
Maintenance .............................................210
Shifting........................................................ 84
Transporting Pets ..........................................174
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................232
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid)......................................... 60
Trunk Release Remote Control........................ 60
Turn Signals.............................................. 42, 77
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings ..............................17, 121
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display ..121
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features..................................17, 20, 121
Passive Entry Programming......................... 20
Uniform Tire Quality Grades...........................238
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................244
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................153
USB ................................................................. 52
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................34
Vehicle Certification Label ............................ 111
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 243
Vehicle Loading ..........................111, 112, 227
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 200
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations...................... 8
Vehicle Security Alarm .....................................18
Vehicle Storage.......................................50, 239
Voice Command...............................................25
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................25
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard............................. 177
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)....................................................74
Warranty Information.................................... 251
Washer
Adding Fluid.............................................. 199
Washers, Windshield .................................... 199
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 240
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 118
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care........................... 236
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 236
Wind Buffeting .................................................57
Window Fogging...............................................50
Windows ..........................................................56
Power...........................................................56
Reset Auto-Up..............................................57
Windshield Defroster .................................... 174
Windshield Washers ........................................45
Fluid.......................................................... 199
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 204
Windshield Wipers ...........................................45
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 204
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................46
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend
or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
First Edition V2
_LX_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
